JP2019177186A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can provide a variation to a performance for changing the display mode of a display during consumption and increase game entertainment.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: corresponding display execution means for displaying a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display being executed; and performance execution means capable of executing a corresponding display change performance for changing the display mode of the corresponding display to be displayed. The performance execution means can execute a specific performance that presents a candidate image suggesting the display mode of the corresponding display after the change. The execution ratio of a successful performance varies depending on the type of the candidate image presented in the specific performance, and the execution ratio of the successful performance is higher when execution is made at the second timing than when execution is made at the first timing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31B

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins in a predetermined prize area (start prize opening) provided in the game area (a start condition is satisfied). A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and it is advantageous for the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol) There is one configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  In addition, as a gaming machine as described above, there is a gaming machine that moves a holding display corresponding to the change to a display area or an accessory at the time of digestion and displays it at the time of digestion (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, there is a gaming machine that displays an image that suggests a possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2013-66654 A JP 2006-15007 A

  However, even if the effect described in Patent Document 1 or the technology described in Patent Document 2 is combined to determine whether the display mode changes with respect to the display during digestion, for example, the execution timing of the effect is If it is fixed, attention cannot be paid to the execution timing of the effect. As a result, the player's interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a variety of effects for changing the display mode of the display during digestion and improving the gaming interest. .

(A) The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine which is one embodiment of the present invention performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player. A hold storage unit capable of storing information relating to variable display that has not yet been started as hold information, a hold display unit that displays a hold display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage unit, and execution A corresponding display executing means for displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the medium, and a corresponding display changing effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state by changing the display mode of the corresponding display. Possible execution executing means, wherein the effect executing means changes the display mode of the corresponding display during variable display and does not change the display mode of the corresponding display. A common effect that is executed in common and a success effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display after the execution of the common effect or a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display. The display mode includes a normal mode and a special mode which is a mode different from the normal mode, and the special mode is a first special mode and an expectation degree controlled to the advantageous state from the first special mode. A second special aspect having a high level, and the effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect that presents a candidate image suggesting a display mode of the corresponding display after the change as the common effect, and the specific effect As an example, including a plurality of candidate presentation effects for presenting a plurality of types of candidate images, the execution ratio of the successful effects varies depending on the type of the candidate image presented in the specific effects, the effect execution means, The common effect can be executed at a plurality of timings including a first timing in one variable display and a second timing after the first timing, and the common effect is executed at the second timing. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the execution ratio of the success effect is higher than when the common effect is executed at the first timing.
(1) A gaming machine of another aspect executes variable display of identification information (for example, variable display of special figure, variable display of decorative figure, variable display of special figure and decorative figure, etc.), and display result (for example, When the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means for deriving and displaying a confirmed decorative symbol, a confirmed special symbol, etc.), a gaming machine that controls to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player (for example, , A gaming machine 1, etc.) that constitute a part of the outer shape of the gaming machine and that can change between a first state and a second state different from the first state (for example, a rendering device 300L, 300R and the like, and a storage unit capable of storing the variable display of the identification information that has not yet started as a storage for holding (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, the first start winning prize) Receive command bar 194A, the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and the hold display means for displaying the hold in a predetermined display mode for each of the hold memories stored in the hold storage means (for example, in step S162) A process of adding a hold display to the first start prize storage display area 5HL in the first hold addition process, a process of adding a hold display to the second start prize storage display area 5HR in the second hold addition process of step S165, and the like) In connection with the start of variable display of identification information, a special image representing information including a digestion display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, a hold display corresponding to the variable display is displayed. This represents information corresponding to the active display moved to the predetermined active display area AHA or the active display corresponding to the variable display. For example, the active display area AHA is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5. At least the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA. A special image display means for displaying in the active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH, a region including a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW), and the display of the special image during the variable display of the identification information A common effect that is executed in common when the mode is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed (for example, in the first system change effect, before the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display, In the second system change effect, the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display. And a successful effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect (for example, in the first system change effect, any figure “Y” in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display) Then, in the effect of changing to the star display mode or the second system change effect, the effect that the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame changes, or these first system change effects And the second system change effect and the failure effect (for example, in the first system change effect) that does not change the display mode of the special image or the like. In an effect that the display of the active display does not change by the disappearance of any of the figures “star” in the figure group Y1 colliding with the active display, or in the second system change effect. The arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and an effect that does not change the line thickness of the active display frame and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed. And an effect execution means capable of executing an active display or an effect that does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display frames, and any one of a plurality of timings during execution of variable display of identification information The gaming machine is characterized in that a ratio of executing the successful effect varies depending on whether the common effect is executed at a timing.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine pays attention to the execution timing of the common effect that determines whether the display mode of the special image representing the information including the display at the time of digestion corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is changed. Can be made. Further, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), a prior notification unit that notifies in advance that the movable device operates may be provided.

  According to such a configuration, the player can be more focused on the operation of the movable device.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the plurality of timings at which the common effect can be executed may include before and after the reach display mode constituting a part of the specific display result is displayed. .

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after reach establishment).

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the common effect is more than the case where the common display is executed at the first timing of variable display of the identification information being executed. In the case where it is executed at the second timing after the timing of 1, the rate at which the success effect is executed may be higher.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information being executed.

(5) Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to enter an advantageous state in any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4) (for example, in the processing of step S412 by the CPU 103, the special figure display result and the pending storage) 17 is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 17, and the variation category is determined based on the selected variation category determination table and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. In the winning random number determination process in step S220, a special figure display result, a process for determining a jackpot type, etc.) and whether or not the advantageous state is reached before the determination by the prior determination means. Specific determination means for determining (for example, the “big hit” or “small bonus” variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols in the special symbol normal processing of step S110 And the like, a process of determining before the variable display result is derived and displayed) and any one of a plurality of types of hold display corresponding to the hold storage determined by the specific determination means. And an effect execution means capable of executing the hold notice effect displayed in the display mode, and a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect indicating whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes. The display mode includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a first special mode and a second special mode that are different from the normal mode and the special mode. Depending on the determination result of the specific determination means, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage determined by the specific determination means is displayed in different proportions in the first special mode or the second special mode. T , It is possible to change and display the hold display at a plurality of timings to the first special mode or the second special mode, and the suggestion effect execution means, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, The suggestion effect may be executed at a higher frequency than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

  According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning in an effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination rate of the display mode of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by an active display change effect execution presence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect at the time of active display change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system | strain change effect execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting of the determination ratio by an active display change effect execution presence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a figure which shows the modification provided with a movable apparatus. It is a figure which shows the modification provided with a movable apparatus.

(Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

As an example, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B
Then, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball is in a normally open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Note that a winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. Further, a winning when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning combination). Is paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure display device 4A executes the first special figure game if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display (described later) executed on the image display device 5 (described later) is established. Further, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls that have passed (entered) the second starting winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning prize). If the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special figure holding memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special symbol display device 4B executes the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a graphic game (described later) or a variable display of decorative symbols (described later) executed in the image display device 5 is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, when there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, they are also simply referred to as “start winning opening”. Further, when there is no particular distinction between the first start prize and the second start prize, they are also simply referred to as “start prize”. Further, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number”. When it is referred to as “the number of memories”, it may indicate any one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special prize winning port. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one. The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to the symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). It should be noted that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol, It suffices if the fluctuation time is within.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (the stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second as the hold display area. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second display digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Active display area AHA displaying a special image representing information including active display (also called digestion display, current display) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the special map hold information (Digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display Frequency, time display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame that surrounds the active display, an active display, or an active display such as characters or images displayed around the active display frame or the active display frame Information according to the information is displayed by a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the gaming machine 1 may include other rendering devices such as a rendering model having a drive unit as the rendering device. Good.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number “2” is a small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The symbol may be a symbol, or the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the second round number being less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of one of the special game games, the decorative pattern variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation symbol”). Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before reaching the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the degree of expectation for jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. In the slip effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, after the variable display of the decorative design is started, a predetermined number of decorative designs are temporarily displayed until the fixed decorative design that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of decorative designs are variable. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols temporarily stop temporarily in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display) number of times (one time), the number of re-variable display (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (final variable display), and re-variability between the first variable display and the last variable display. The number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the total number of times (X + 2) are grasped. In addition, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. In addition, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decorative design is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display, a message window display, etc. There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

In the present embodiment, the notice effect is common when the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the change is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. Includes common effects performed in The notice effect includes a success effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect, and a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect.
Note that the notice effect may include a suggestion effect that suggests a common effect. The suggestion effect may be an effect that is executed in common when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, similarly to the common effect. In other words, when an effect that suggests that a common effect is executed is referred to as a suggestion effect, and an effect that suggests that either a successful effect or a failure effect is executed (a common effect or a common effect) Another production) may be referred to as a suggestion production.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that gives a notice or suggestion to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning a certain game ball may become a reach state is at least the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that informs or suggests to the player that the variable display result by winning a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern by winning the game ball is stopped and displayed. May be executed (started) before.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is determined by the player whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a play operation that is a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-play notice effect for informing (indicating) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball is at least the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice notice effect), for example, a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, or in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. Action effects such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. In addition, in the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the second start win memory display area 5HR. Action effects such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state is reached after the decorative symbol variable display is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big winning symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a special symbol that becomes the normal opening round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probability big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations after a predetermined reach production is executed in response to the reach state. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, the same type of normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”) on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a combination that displays the final stop. As an example of the normal symbol, among the eight types of decorative symbols with symbol numbers “1” to “8”, four types of decorative symbols with even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” It is.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, the predetermined decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed.

  By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, etc., and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variable bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variable display state is Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination May be displayed in a stopped manner. In other words, when the probability variation jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the special figure game, the decoration symbol that becomes the predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is finally stopped, and the decoration symbol that becomes the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. May be. The predetermined probability variation big hit combination is, for example, a combination in which the same kind of probability variation symbols are aligned on the effective line and are finally stopped and displayed. An example of a probabilistic design is the four types of decorative symbols with odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” among the eight types of decorative symbols with symbol numbers “1” to “8”. It is.

Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has a variable display result of “big hit” This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended.
Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time-shortening control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control for making the tilt control time for performing the game longer than that in the normal state and a control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening along with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently. Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be frequently executed, and each special figure game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “small hit”. After that, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game whose variable display result is “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable big hit combination or a probable variable big hit combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination, it is changed again in a state where the same decorative symbol is aligned, The decorative symbol (probable variation symbol) and the decorative symbol (normal symbol) that is a normal jackpot combination may be finally stopped and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol.

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during a round in the jackpot gaming state, the next round starts after any round ends in the jackpot gaming state During the jackpot that will be a promising change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state, such as the period until the next variable display game starts after the last round in the big hit game state A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion promotion executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state is sometimes referred to as “end promotion promotion” in particular.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function for outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function for outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. Further, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is used to output sound from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit” or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a final stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize opening formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A. This is a first start slot winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the stored storage information, a first start opening prize designation command or a second start opening prize designation command for designating whether the start winning prize is given to the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening is designated. Along with the transmission, a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second code) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. is there. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 15A), the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. Whether or not “small hit” is determined. If “big hit” is determined, the big hit type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the fluctuation category The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and determines the type of big hit. In addition to being able to recognize, the change category can be recognized based on the value set in the change category command.

  The effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). . Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the operation and an input / output port (I / O) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in a probabilistic state or a short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (lack) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (lack). The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.
The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach α (lost). The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas.
The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.
The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In FIG. 5, the description of the fluctuation pattern when the big hit type of the big hit fluctuation pattern and the big hit fluctuation pattern is abrupt is omitted, but the loss fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern, Reach loss variation pattern) and jackpot variation pattern (except when the jackpot type is abrupt).

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, Data constituting a table as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. Prepared in advance. In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state with “small hit” for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the second special figure game (special game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state with “small hit” for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the special figure display result determination table 130B A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). More decision values than usual are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). If the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “30000” to “30350”) are allocated to the special figure display result of “small hit”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, since the “special hit” is not achieved in the second special figure game, for example, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B such as a short-time state (low-accuracy base state) or a probability variation state (high-accuracy high-base state) is formed. In a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second starting prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a “small hit” that makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in game entertainment due to the extended game. .

  In the second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A, determination values in different predetermined ranges may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display results. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller decision value than the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Or you may make it determine a special figure display result with reference to a common special figure display result determination table with a 1st special figure game and a 2nd special figure game.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprising change” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined range of determination values ( When the second special figure game is executed while the variable special figure is the second special figure, the value in the range of “82” to “99” is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. No decision value is assigned to the jackpot type of “Accuracy” With such a setting, since it is not “accurate” in the second special figure game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable prize-winning ball apparatus 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult “accuracy” and to prevent a decrease in game interest due to the extended game.

  It should be noted that the determined values in different predetermined ranges may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. . For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of “probability” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined with reference to common table data in the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure and the second special figure.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special figure game that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates a reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and the CPU 103 generates a random number based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first starting condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the common figure hold storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL to be one of a plurality of types. Yes. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display. . Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR to be one of a plurality of types. Has been. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display. . Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores a hold effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not to execute a hold effect (also referred to as an action effect or a hold change effect). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold effect is executed, when the hold effect is not executed and when it is executed. Is assigned. In the present embodiment, the hold effect is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL to the notice mode, and is displayed in the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. This is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display form of the held display to the notice form. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change gaze effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  The ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (success effect) that changes a special image including an active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect, with or without execution of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

  In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) for changing a special image into a notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame that surrounds the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is an effect to change (main notice effect). In the active display change effect, as described above, the common effect, the successful effect (also referred to as the active display change effect) executed when the special image is changed after the common effect is executed, and the common effect are executed. A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gas effect) that is executed when the special image is not changed later is included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not acting on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or the failure effect acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect that changes the mode of the special image into one of a plurality of modes and a change of the special image in the second system. And the 2nd system | strain change effect changed to either of several aspects is included. The first system change effect includes a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. There are common production, success production, and failure production. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is in the special image. The display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image) is changed.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores the first system change referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect that is one of the active display change effects (timing at which timing the change is executed). An effect execution timing determination table is stored. In the first system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect related to the first system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first system change effect effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first system change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In the execution timing determination table for the first system change effect, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Yes. Also, instead of a plurality of first system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all first system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores the second system change referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the second system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (timing at which timing of the change is executed). An effect execution timing determination table is stored. In the second system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect related to the second system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. The ROM 121 stores a plurality of second-system change effect effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the second-system change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In the second system change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the second system change effect execution timing is assigned to each execution timing. Yes. Also, instead of a plurality of second system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large second system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all second system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

  The ROM 121 includes a plurality of first system changes in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table for the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect, their respective determination ratios, and the like are different from each other. An effect execution timing determination table for effects and an execution timing determination table for second system change effects may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. The active display change effect execution timing determination table includes a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect at each execution timing, and the second system. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, or a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (determined value) to be compared may be assigned. Further, instead of a plurality of active display change effect execution timing determination tables, one large active display change effect execution timing determination table including information of all active display change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good.

  The ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine an active display change effect effect pattern (effect mode) as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the active display change effect effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a random value (not shown) for determining the active display change effect effect pattern for each of the active display change effect effect patterns. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as the number of changes to be executed). In addition, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table. In this hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect execution timing may be assigned to each execution timing. Further, instead of a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the main notice effect other than the active display change effect described above. It may be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the types of main notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main notice effect pattern determination table. In the main notice effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern is assigned to each main notice effect pattern. Good.
Instead of a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice effect pattern determination table including information on all main notice effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect as one of a plurality of types. In this case, the ROM 121 is assigned a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern for each of the hold change effect patterns in the hold change effect pattern determination table. Just do it.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution presence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the change change effect effect is executed. In this case, in the pending change gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining whether or not to hold the change change gaze effect is executed. (Determined value) may be assigned.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect effect (timing of how many changes will be executed later). . In this case, the ROM 121 only needs to store a plurality of hold change change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the hold change change effect execution timing determination table. . A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change gaze effect may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the pending change gaze effect execution timing determination table. . It should be noted that instead of a plurality of hold change change effect execution timing determination tables, one large change change effect effect execution timing determination table including information on all hold change change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a hold-change-gase effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) for the hold-change change effect. In this case, the ROM 121 has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the pending change gasset effect pattern for each of the reserved change gasset effect patterns in the reserved change gasset effect pattern determination table. It may be assigned.

  The ROM 121 also has an active display mode determination table (also referred to as “digestion display mode determination table”) that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA. May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables that are different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table. In the display mode determination table for active display, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the display mode for active display may be assigned to each display mode for active display. That is, the ROM 121 has a plurality of active display display modes in which the determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of active display display modes are different from each other. It is sufficient that the determination table is stored. Instead of a plurality of active display display mode determination tables, one large active display display mode determination table including information of all active display display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations performed by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data to be stored is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are configured by data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation of symbols, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating operation control contents and the like in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data. Control is performed to determine the contents of the effect by accepting an operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the effective period. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that is not a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The rendering operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the movable member provided in the production model is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening prize designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start area winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  In the present embodiment, the data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notification command) )) Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the second start prize from the head in the empty area of the second start prize reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents of the prefetching notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (steps). S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 11 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in steps S208 and S211 in FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S220 of FIG. 14 as the winning random number determination process.

  In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is ON (step S201; Yes), the first special figure reservation memory number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). (4)) is determined (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start opening switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), After executing the process of step S209, based on the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the second start opening switch 22B. It is determined whether or not is on (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number (the second special figure game holding number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit storing number). (4)) is determined (step S204). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the start winning determination process Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  As the start winning process (steps S208 and S211), the CPU 103 updates the special figure holding storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, by one (step S215 in FIG. 14). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as holding information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure holding storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220), the CPU 103, for example, confirms the state of the time reduction flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and the like, so that the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is identified (step S401 in FIG. 15A). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

  Following the processing of step S401, the starting port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current value are obtained from the table data constituting the first special figure display result decision table 130A or the second special figure display result decision table 130B. Corresponding to the gaming state, the special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S402). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 in FIG. 14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data selected by the processing of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and each It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparing. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) it can.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes processing similar to that in the case of the big hit determination range for the decision value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result decision table data selected in step S402. Thus, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” is sent to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are performed (step S405).

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is sent to the effect control board 12. Is set for transmission (step S407).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result in the process of step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 displays the special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403 or step S404) or the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variable category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected based on the stored value such as the first reserved memory number count value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variation category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for variation category determination extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. The configuration example of the variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 17A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 17B to 17D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 shows a selection example in which any setting is selected from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIG. 17A to FIG. This is a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  FIG. 17A shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (a variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B), a variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 determined values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”, and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, the shortened / non-reachable ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of reserved memories is “4”. > Determination rate “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “1”.

  Also, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the super-reach (losing) fluctuation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, any one of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and the interest in the game can be improved. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance that at least the reach is not achieved.

  Then, after performing the setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 (step S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command. The transmission setting processing for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol variable display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special diagram) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special diagram) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by the common processing routine. When the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit pre-release processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, the big win type corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change” is set to “29 seconds” as the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened, and the upper prize is the upper limit number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit ending process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9. And a process for performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is only necessary to set the game state to be a small hit game state by setting “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening the big winning opening to “15”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process waits until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9. Processing to be included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is ended, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S232, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) is shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). In the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. When the figure game is put on hold, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A. As the data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. Similarly to the process of step S402 shown in FIG. 15A, special figure display result determination table data is selected (step S239). That is, in the process of step S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table in accordance with the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of step S239, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. In this case, the second special figure display result determination table 130B may be set in the usage table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” (step S240).

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the big hit type determination random number MR2 stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is changed to “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is decided which of the jackpot types is a plurality of types (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that it is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state? A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further according to the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR3 for determining the variation category and the variation pattern for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random value MR5 is extracted.

  As described above, when there is a determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category in any of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of reserved memories, it corresponds to the same variation category. When the random number MR3 that matches the determination value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of reserved memories is different between the time of executing the winning random number determination process (step S220) and the time of executing the variation pattern setting process (step S111). Even if they are greatly different, the variation pattern setting process determines the same variation category as the winning random number determination process. For example, in the specific examples of the variable category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, “99”, the winning is won regardless of the number of reserved memories. The fluctuation category “PA5” is determined in both the random time value determination process and the fluctuation pattern setting process. Further, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of, for example, “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is used in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing regardless of the number of reserved memories. Is determined. In the process of step S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category using the variation category determination random value MR3 stored as the hold data, but the CPU 103 newly determines the variation category determination random value MR3. The variation category may be determined by using the extracted random number MR3 for determining the variation category that has been extracted.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses the newly extracted random number MR3 for determining the variation category to determine the variation category as in step S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, based on the special figure display result and the number of reserved storage, the variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. The variation category is determined based on the table and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects any variation pattern determination table to be set as a use table from among a plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, based on the variation category that is the determination result. Subsequently, based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, the CPU 103 selects any variation pattern from among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Decide.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. Note that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 19A is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 19D to 19H.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the special figure display result determined in steps S403, S404, S409, etc. are made (steps S405, S407, S410), and determined in step S412. A transmission setting for transmitting a variation category command corresponding to the variation category (step S413) is performed, and a transmission setting for transmitting a pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221).

  After these processes are executed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 is executed, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). When the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, and notification of reserved memory count Four commands called commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted as a set in one timer interruption.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal process of step S110, the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like. In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. When the variable display is started by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designation command, and the like are included in one timer interrupt. Sent in bulk.
Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  In other words, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) in the special symbol normal processing (step S110) at the timing when the variable symbol or variable symbol variable display is started is set to “big hit” or “small hit”. It is determined whether or not to control to the gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and the variable pattern setting process (step S111) determines a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols, respectively. The content determined by the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number determination process (step S220), It is determined whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state as “small hits”, and a rough variable display mode (variation category) of the decorative symbols is determined, and determined by each production control command The contents thus transmitted are transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis processing executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined and set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S75, effect random number update processing is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 20 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). If it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If it is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; Yes), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning (Step S512), the process returns to Step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designating command at step S506 (step S506; Yes), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), after making settings according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the gaming state designation command is analyzed to identify the current gaming state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to determine whether the time is short.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When receiving commands are sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 20 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S150 of FIG. 22 as the winning effect determination process.

  In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). It is checked (step S151), and it is determined whether or not a first start port winning designation command is received as a new received command (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the stored contents in the second start prize received command buffer 194B are checked (step S153), and a new one is received. It is determined whether or not a second start opening winning designation command is received as a received command (step S153). If it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; No), the winning effect determining process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), when it is specified that the time is not short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. (Step S155: NO), the first hold effect determination process is executed (step S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL.
In addition, in the case where a hold change effect or a hold change gaze effect for a hold display when additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is executed, in the step, whether the hold change effect or the hold change gaze effect is executed. What is necessary is just to perform the process which determines the execution timing of a holding | maintenance effect, etc., when the process which determines whether it is determined to perform a holding | maintenance effect is determined.

First, the determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when additionally displaying in the first start winning storage display area 5HL will be described.
FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of hold display mode determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 24A shows the hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (abbreviation / non-reach loss)” or the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by a determination table. FIG. 24B shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 24C shows setting of a display mode determination ratio of a hold display by a hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (lost))” among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 24D shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (losing)) among the above seven types. 24E shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above seven types. 24 is a setting example (H-TBL5) of a mode determination ratio, and FIG.24 (F) is a hold selected when the variation category “PB4 (super reach α (big hit))” is selected from the above seven types. Fig. 24G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the display mode determination ratio of the hold display by the display mode determination table, and Fig. 24G shows the variation category "PB5 (super It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when

  According to FIG. 24, for example, in the case of reach, it is easier to determine red and yellow than in the case of non-reach, and it is difficult to determine blue and white (initial color). In addition, in the case of reaching, it is easier to determine red and yellow, and it is difficult to determine blue and white compared to when reaching hot (for example, super reach) and not reach (for example, normal reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIGS. 16, 17, and 24, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, red and yellow are more easily determined than when the special figure display result is “losing”. The white color is difficult to determine. In other words, the red and yellow display modes have a higher expectation level for executing a hot effect or a big hit than the blue and white display modes. More specifically, the degree of expectation that a hot performance is executed and the degree of expectation that is a big hit are higher in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white.

  That is, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 uses a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 24 based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11. A hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the determination tables, and added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be displayed is determined.

  After executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (step S161). . Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determining process to the first start prize corresponding to the first start prize buffer number in the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, and when determining to execute the hold change effect, the content of the hold effect determination process (hold change) (Execution timing in the case of executing the effect, execution timing in the case of executing the hold change gaze effect, execution timing in the case of executing the hold change) corresponding to the buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to In association with the buffer number of 1 prefetch notice buffer 194C, determination contents of hold effect determination processing (information (eg, flag) indicating execution of hold change effect, information indicating execution of hold change effect) (eg, information indicating execution of hold change effect) Flag), information indicating execution of the hold change (for example, flag)), and a hold display as a target hold display. Information specifying the changed hold display (that is, the hold display by the first start winning) (for example, the first pre-reading notice corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A) Buffer number of the buffer 194C) may be stored.

  In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning of the third special figure hold memory number 3, the additional display mode “white”, the hold effect “executed (hold change effect executed) When the execution timing is determined as “next variation”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). ”) Is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number“ 3 ”) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, and the first corresponding to the execution timing“ next variation ”is stored. The buffer number (buffer number) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning prize It may be stored and "1") information and buffer number '3' indicating running held change effect in association with the.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determining process, the buffer in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determining process. Only information specifying the target hold display (hold display by the first start winning prize) may be stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number (hold change effect is executed) (It is not necessary to store information indicating that this is to be done.)

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determining process (step S160) (the first start winning in the first start winning received command buffer 194A). The first display for adding a new hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first A hold addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning storage display area 5HL to display the hold display in the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set presentation control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first holding effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command is received (step S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time is short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. Step S156: YES), the second hold effect determination process is executed (Step S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process for determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.
In addition, in the case of executing a hold change effect or a hold change gaze effect for a hold display when additionally displaying in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, in the step, whether the hold change effect or the hold change gaze effect is executed. What is necessary is just to perform the process which determines the execution timing of a holding | maintenance effect, etc., when the process which determines whether it is determined to perform a holding | maintenance effect is determined.

  In addition, each process of step S163, step S164, and step S165 related to the second start opening prize is the same as the process related to each process of step S160, step S161, and step S162 related to the first start opening prize, Since “first” in each step can be read as “second” and the code can be read corresponding to the reading, the description is omitted.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command is received (step S152; Yes), and it is specified that the time is short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. S155: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL as the initial color (white), and receives the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. In association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content, the first hold display in the white display mode is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL (step S166). Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  Further, when it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time is not short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. (Step S156: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR as the normal display (white ball), and at the second start winning prize In association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content in the received command buffer 194B, the second hold display of the normal display (white ball) display mode is added to the second start winning storage display area 5HR. (Step S166). Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  After the winning effect determination process in step S150 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, the following steps S170 to S170 are performed. One of the processes of 177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, or the like transmitted from the main board 11 is received. This includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, the process of determining the fixed decorative design according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result, or the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted and activated. Processing for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effects of various effects (for example, active display as a main notice effect) It includes processing for determining a change effect and an effect mode of the active display change effect. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 based on the read control data, and displays it on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the audio control board 13. Then, various types of effect control are executed, such as control for outputting effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 by outputting an electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14.

  After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the final decorative design is displayed in full stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative symbol on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set content, and in step S172 Similar to the variable display effect processing, various effect controls in the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electrical decoration signal, and the like. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and reads various control data based on the set contents, and in step S172 Similar to the variable display effect process, various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, or the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot gaming state, reads various control data based on the set contents, and performs variable display in step S172. Similar to the medium effect process, various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set contents, and is performing variable display in step S172. Similar to the effect process, various effect controls at the end of the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, or the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 in FIG. 22 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result becomes “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S522; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the designated fluctuation pattern Is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (ie, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-2”, “PA2-3” in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not there is (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating a random number for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S526). When it is determined to be “accuracy” or “small hit” (step S526; Yes), for example, a definite decoration that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “accuracy” or “small hit”, such as an opening chance. A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). In this case, numerical data indicating random numbers for chance eye determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. For example, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined.

  When it is determined in step S526 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” or “small hit” (step S526; No), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is displayed. A combination is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the display is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative design having the same design number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit, the decision may be made to make a different decorative symbol a final decorative symbol. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, any one of the multiple types of normal symbols is selected and determined as the definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable big hit combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols, and a definite ornament symbol pattern that constitutes a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination is selected. You just have to decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of a non-probability variable big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probable change state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the big win game state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a confirmed decorative symbol of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that the probability variation state is controlled is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  When it is specified that the time is not short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (step S155: NO), after executing any of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528, the pending digestion is performed. Processing is executed (step S531). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the variation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the variation is displayed). For example, when the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning memory display area An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL Is displayed). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is used as a usage pattern, and the first start winning memory display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 123. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Further, in the process of step S531, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 displays the other hold display as the first. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

  After executing the process of step S531, an effect execution setting process is executed (step S532). The effect execution setting process includes a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, a process for determining the type of active display change effect at the time of execution, and an active at the time of execution. Includes the process of determining the display mode of the display change effect, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when it is executed, and the process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on these determination results It is. Details will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S532, the execution execution setting during other variable display is performed (step S533). As an example, in the process of step S533, the execution setting of “one-shot notification effect” is made to immediately notify (definitely notify) that the variable display result is “big hit” by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission. May be. Examples of jackpot notification sounds are alarm sounds, chime sounds, siren sounds, and the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp constituting the light emitting member 9CC. Moreover, in the process of step S533, you may set so that the production | presentation of a predetermined aspect may be performed, for example for liveliness, regardless of whether a variable display result turns into "big hit". For example, you may set so that the effect of the aspect which a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, light emission member 9SL, 9SR) light-emits is performed.

  After executing the process of step S533, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S534). . Subsequently, a change display start setting process for making a setting for starting the change of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (step S535). For example, image display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process in step S532 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The sound at the speaker 8 is transmitted by setting the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of the device 5 or transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13. Setting for starting output and setting for starting light emission in the lamp 9 by transmitting an illumination signal designated by lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14 are performed. .

  After executing the processing of step S535, the command stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning prize reception command buffer 194B is digested (step S536). Specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the most of the commands associated with the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening prize designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the command is stored in the received command buffer at the second start winning prize. Delete the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the divided commands shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  Further, in the process of step S536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first prefetching advance notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching advance notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also performed in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command. . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S537), and the variable display start setting process ends.

Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process for determining the type of the active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active The process of determining whether to execute the display change effect will be described.
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table.
In the setting example, whether or not the active display change effect is to be executed and the type of active display change effect (which active display change effect is to be executed) are determined. It is a setting example.
In the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with a random number MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect are “executed” and “not executed”. Are assigned at a decision rate as shown in FIG. In the “execution present” in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR7 (not shown) for determination is “first system change effect” and “ Each of the “second system change effect” and the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” is assigned at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Further, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display frame, The target which acts by the 2nd system change production differs.

  “Execution present” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. “Execution” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are active display changes. Indicates that it is performed as a production. “No execution” indicates that no active display change effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is a fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3 shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 26, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA1-X, PA2-X, “no execution” is 100. %, Indicating that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the fluctuation is non-reach (losing), it indicates that the active display change effect is not executed.

  Further, when the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the variation pattern PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X Compared to a certain case, the rate at which “no execution” is determined is low. In other words, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change is “big hit” is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the loss occurs in the change. In other words, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  When the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the variation pattern is PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the ratio of determining “first system change effect and second system change effect” when “execution is performed” is determined is higher. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PB3-X, the ratio at which “first system change effect and second system change effect” are determined when “execution present” is determined is approximately 57% (40 ÷ 70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the ratio at which the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are determined when “execution present” is determined is approximately 33% (10 ÷ 30). It is. Or more specifically, whether the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is any of the variation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X or any of the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) in which the “first system change effect and second system change effect” are determined by the change pattern of the change specified by the change pattern specification command is the change pattern PA3-X to PA5-. It is larger than the difference in the ratio at which the “first system change effect” or the “second system change effect” is determined depending on which of X is the variation pattern PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, when the variation pattern is PB3-X, the ratio at which “first system change effect and second system change effect” are determined, and when the variation pattern is PA3-X, “first system change effect and second system change effect”. While the difference from the ratio at which the “production” is determined is 30% (40% −10%), the ratio and the fluctuation pattern at which the “first system change effect” is determined when the variation pattern PB3-X is used. The difference from the ratio at which the “first system change effect” is determined when PA3-X is 5% (15% -10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of being a “big hit” is higher than when the first system change effect is not performed.

  When the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the variation pattern is PA3-X, PB3-X. Compared to the case, the rate at which “no execution” is determined is lower. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the reach becomes super reach in the change is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the reach becomes normal reach in the change. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation for super reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation for super reach is higher than when the first system change effect is not performed.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random number MR7 for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute an active display change effect according to the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display), and when executing an active display change effect, Of these, which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined to be “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And “second system change effect” may be determined.

Next, a process for determining an effect mode of an active display change effect to be executed in the case of active display (fluctuation) for executing an active display change effect will be described.
FIG. 27A is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27B is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27 (C) shows the determination ratio of the production style of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting.

  In the illustrated example, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. The variation pattern PA3-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 represents the variation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, and PA4 shown in FIG. -3 or PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of four types of first system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. In addition, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of three types of second system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of 12 types of first system change effects and second system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. To do.

The first system change effect is an action effect that changes the display mode of the active display for active display, for example, an action effect that changes the display shape of the active display.
In FIG. 27A, if the active display change effect pattern “BP1” is, as a default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere”, the display shape of the active display is “sphere”. This is an effect pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect) that is not changed. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  Further, the active display change effect pattern “BP2” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the “triangle” active display. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It is high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP3” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “pentagon”. It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the drawing, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “lost”. It is high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  Further, the active display change effect pattern “BP4” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “star”. It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the drawing, the determination ratio is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the variation pattern becomes “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) that becomes “lost”.

The second system change effect is an action effect that changes the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, for example, an action effect that changes the line thickness of the active display frame.
In FIG. 27 (B), the active display change effect pattern “CP1” has an active display frame as a default when the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the variation is “normal”. This is an effect pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect effect) in which the thickness of the line is not changed to “normal”. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP2” is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “middle thickness”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It is high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP3” is a success effect effect pattern in which the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. According to the example shown in the drawing, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “lost”. It is high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The first system change effect and the second system change effect are the active display that surrounds the active display by the action effect that changes the display mode of the active display by the first system change effect and the second system change effect that is described above. It is an action effect that performs both an effect effect that changes the display mode of the frame.
In FIG. 27C, the active display change effect pattern “AP1” has, as a default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is “sphere”, and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display. If the display is “normal”, the display of the active display remains “sphere” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal” and the effect of failure (active display change effect) It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP2” is a success in changing the active display frame shape from “normal” to “middle thickness” while keeping the display shape of the active display as “sphere” and enclosing the active display. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It is high. Further, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is for heat (for example, super reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP3” is a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display remains “sphere” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “very thick”. This is the production pattern. When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “lost”. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “AP4” is an effect pattern in an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed to “normal”. The effect pattern “AP5” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thickness”. “AP6” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern “AP7” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP8” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thickness”. The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern “AP10” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP11” is an effect pattern that changes the display shape of the active display to “star” and changes the line thickness of the active display frame to “middle thickness”. The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 uses the random value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the change pattern of the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command ( The active display change effect pattern is determined as an effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

Next, a process for determining the timing for executing the active display change effect in the fluctuation will be described.
FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio based on the effect execution timing determination table when executing the first system change effect.
The ROM 121 stores a plurality of (for example, four) first system change effect execution timings according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the first system change effect execution execution timings. And
The timing 1 is, for example, the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, and the timing 2 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the time of the pseudo continuous fluctuation. The timing at which the first system change effect is executed when the reach in the change is established, and the timing 4 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed after the reach is established in the change (during reach). The pseudo continuous fluctuation time is, for example, when the variable display during the fluctuation is temporarily stopped.

  Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified as “success expectation degree“ small ”” indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is “small”, and “success expectation degree“ medium ”. The variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 are classified as “medium” in which the degree of expectation that the successful performance is executed is higher than the degree of success expectation “small”. Represents. Further, the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified as “success expectation degree“ large ”” indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is “large” higher than the success expectation degree “medium”. In the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are expressed and classified as “success expectation degree“ maximum ””, the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is the above-described success expectation degree “high”. Represents a higher “maximum”.

  Specifically, in FIG. 27, variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are active display change effect patterns BP1 that are failure effects of the first system change effect and active displays that are failure effects of the second system change effect. The ratio determined for the change display pattern CP1 and the active display change display pattern AP1 that is the failure display of the first system change display and the second system change display is compared with the ratio determined for the other active display change display patterns. The level of success is low, and the degree of success that can be executed successfully is low.

  In FIG. 27, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. In PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4 which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3 which are successful effects of the second system change effect, The ratio determined for the active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which are the successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, is higher than the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. The success expectation at which the success effect can be executed is higher than that of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, the degree of expectation that a successful effect can be executed is high due to the variation pattern as shown in FIG.

In the illustrated example, the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5 that is not a pseudo continuous variation. −1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, and PB5-2 represent that the first system change effect is not executed at timing 2.
According to FIG. 28, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern that becomes “big hit”, the determination ratio determined at a later timing (for example, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than the variation pattern that becomes “lost”. . In addition, after reaching reach (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of a successful performance is higher than before reaching (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). In addition, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of the successful effect is higher than that before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation (for example, the timing 1). Yes.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 changes the random number MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command. The execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed is determined by the pattern (variable display pattern).

  It should be noted that at timing 2, depending on the number of temporary stops of variable display in pseudo continuous fluctuation, for example, immediately after the start of revariable display, such as at the start of the first revariable display or at the start of the second revariable display. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at a plurality of execution timings in a plurality of pseudo continuous fluctuations. Moreover, the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation may be after reach establishment, for example, the execution timing is set to set the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation after timing 3 at the time of reach establishment in FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

In addition, a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 27 and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. May be stored in the ROM 121 as one table.
The same applies to the execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect.

  A setting example (not shown) of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect is an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of execution of the first system change effect as shown in FIG. Even if it is the same, it may be a setting example of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect different from the setting example of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of execution of the first system change effect. Good.

  In FIG. 26, when it is decided to execute “first system change effect and second system change effect”, the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is shown in FIG. Using the example of setting the determination ratio based on the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined in a batch so as to be executed at the same timing. You may determine in a lump so that each execution timing with 2 system | strain change effect may become a different execution timing. 26, when it is determined to execute the “first system change effect and the second system change effect”, the execution timing of each of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is as shown in FIG. The execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined separately using an example of setting the determination ratio based on the effect execution timing determination table.

  Next, processing for setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, and when executing the active display change effect, the active display change An effect production pattern and an execution timing of an active display change effect are set as an effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command as an effect control pattern, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as a production control pattern. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are prepared, any one is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (step S532) ends.

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  On the main board 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first reserved memory number, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the second reserved memory number. Is updated (step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (steps S403 and S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result that is the determination result, the number of reserved storage updated in step S215, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S217 (step S412). . The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command that specifies the variation category that is the determination result (step S413), and executes command control processing (step S17). As a result, a variation category command for designating the variation category determined in step S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the main board 11 side, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first determines the variation category extracted in step S217 in the variation pattern setting process (step S111). Without using the random value MR3, the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the variation pattern sets transmission of a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern that is the determination result, and executes command control processing (step S17). Thereby, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern determined in step S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, in the hold effect determination process (step S160), the first start prize storage display area 5HL or the second start. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display at the time of additionally displaying in the winning memory display area 5HR is determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination contents of the hold effect determination process (for example, the display mode at the time of addition) based on the determination result of the hold effect determination process in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer. While being stored (step S161), a hold display is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second starting winning storage display area 5HR based on the stored contents (display mode at the time of addition) (step S162).

  On the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display, An effect control pattern is set based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the board 11.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 29A (A) and (e) in FIG. 29B (A) are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 29B and (e) of FIG. 29B (B). 29A and 29B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 29A (A) and 29B (A) show the success effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (thickness “extremely thick”)) is set. 29A (B) and 29B (B) show failure effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. (No change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

29A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Or, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.
Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5. The active display area AHA displays at least the active display AH, and includes an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH and a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW in addition to the active display AH. It is also possible to display characters and images in the active display area AHA such as the inside or outside of the active display AH itself or the active display frame AHW.

  Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 29A (A), the display is suspended (active display AH) in the buffer number “1” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. The display mode of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) (additional display mode “white”) is stored as the production content corresponding to In the buffer number “2” of the buffer 194C, the display mode of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning the hold display H1 (additional display mode “white”) is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number “3” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194 </ b> C is determined at the start winning of the hold display H <b> 2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H <b> 2. The display mode of the hold display H2 (additional display mode “white”) is stored, and the buffer number “4” of the first prefetch preview buffer 194C is activated as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning a prize (additional display mode “white”) is stored.

The scene of (a) in FIG. 29A (A) starts variable display of active information of active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA). The effect control CPU 120 starts to change the decorative pattern based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.
In the scene of (a) of FIG. 29A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first reserved memory number to “4”. (Step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217), and for determining the special figure display result. The special figure display result is determined using the random value MR1, the jackpot type determination random value MR2, or the like (steps S403 and S404).

  For example, it is assumed that “losing” is determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” from the plurality of variation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result “losing” and the reserved storage number “4” (FIG. 16). ), The variation category is determined based on the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category (step S412). For example, it is assumed that the variation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” is determined. The CPU 103 sets transmission of a variation category command that designates the variation category “PB5” (step S413), and executes a command control process (step S17) to specify a variation category command that designates the variation category “PB5”. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Receiving the variation category command for designating the variation category from the main board 11, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the suspension display mode used from the plurality of hold display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variation category. A determination table is selected, and a display mode of a hold display (additional display) to be additionally displayed in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display Display mode) is determined.
The effect control CPU 120 determines the hold effect determination processing in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The contents (display mode when added) are stored.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start-winning memory display area in the active display area AHA. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of FIG. 29A (A) (b), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the second system change effect. FIG. 29A (A) (c) shows a case where the second system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 29A (A) (b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). It is an example. In (c) of FIG. 29A (A), an arrow Y2 on which the characters “Intense heat” are drawn is displayed at the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. FIG. 29A (B) (a) to FIG. 29A (B) (c) are the same as FIG. 29A (A) (a) to FIG. 29A (A) (c).
That is, the second system change from (b) of FIG. 29A (A) to (c) of FIG. 29A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 29A (B) to (c) of FIG. 29A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

In the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene of (e) of FIG. 29B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “extremely thick”. The display mode is changed.
Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene of (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 29A (B). “Normal” display mode remains unchanged.
In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 30A (A) and (e) to (f) in FIG. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 30B and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (B). In FIGS. 30A and 30B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 30A (A) and FIG. 30B (A) show the successful effects of the first system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in FIG. 27 (A) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (shape “star”)) is set. 30A (B) and FIG. 30B (B) represent failure effects of the first system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern BP1 (change) shown in FIG. Nothing (shape “sphere”) is set.

  30A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Or, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  Scene (a) in FIG. 30A (A) starts variable display of active information on active display AH (information corresponding to hold information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA). The effect control CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (loss))” designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of (b) in FIG. 30A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start-winning memory display area in the active display area AHA. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of FIG. 30A (A) (b), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation that executes the first system change effect. The scene of FIG. 30A (A) (b) is an example when the 1st system | strain change effect is performed immediately after starting variable display (for example, the timing 1 of FIG. 28). In (b) of FIG. 30A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect.

Then, in the scene of FIG. 30A (A), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 30A (A) is directed to the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move.
In the scene of FIG. 30A (A) (d), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves from the scene of (c) of FIG. 30A to the lower part of the image display device 5, and the figure Of the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the stars Z1 continue to move. 30A (B), (a) to FIG. 30A (B), (d) are the same as FIG. 30A (A), (a) to FIG. 30A (A), (d).
That is, the first system change from (b) of FIG. 30A (A) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 30A (B) to (d) of FIG. 30A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

The scene (e) in FIG. 30B (A) is the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) in FIG. 30A (A). This is a scene that further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH.
In the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (A), after the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene of (e) of FIG. 30B (A), The display shape is changed to “star”.
And in the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (A), it is a scene where the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (B). This is a scene that moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 but disappears before colliding with the active display AH.
In the scene of (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the active display AH in the scene of (e) of FIG. 30B (B) disappears without colliding with the active display AH without disappearing in the figure group Y1, and thus active. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display form of “sphere”.
Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 31A (A) and (e) to (g) in FIG. 31B (A) are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 31B and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B (B). In FIGS. 31A and 31B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIG. 31A (A) and FIG. 31B (A) show the success effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 27C as the effect modes of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (change present (thickness “extremely thick”), change present (shape “star”)) is set. FIG. 31A (B) and FIG. 31B (B) represent failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape “sphere”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  31A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Or, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  In the scene of (a) in FIG. 31A (A), variable display of active information of active display AH (information corresponding to the hold information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA) is started. The effect control CPU 120 starts to change the decorative pattern based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold display. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and displays the hold display. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of FIG. 31A (A) (b), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation for executing the second system change effect. FIG. 31A (A) (c) shows the first system change effect and the second system change effect immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 31A (A) (b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). It is an example when is executed. In (c) of FIG. 31A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change is produced. As an effect, an arrow Y <b> 2 in which the characters “Intense heat” is drawn is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5.
FIG. 31A (B) (a) to FIG. 31A (B) (c) are also the same as FIG. 31A (A) (a) to FIG. 31A (A) (c).
That is, the first system change from (b) of FIG. 31A (A) to (c) of FIG. 31A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 31A (B) to (c) of FIG. 31A (B). This is a common effect that is executed in common between the success effect and the failure effect in the effect and the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. Further, a scene in which the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW. It is.
In the scene of (e) of FIG. 31B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “ The display mode of “extremely thick” is changed. Further, in the scene of FIG. 31A (A) (e), the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of FIG. 31A (A) (d). Among the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. This is a scene that further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH.
In the scene of (g) of FIG. 31B (A), after the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display AH in the scene of (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the active display AH The display shape is changed to “star”.
Then, in the scene of (g) in FIG. 30B (A), the decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. Further, in the scene of FIG. 31A (B) (e), the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of FIG. 31A (B) (d). Among the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.
In the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B). This is a scene that moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 but disappears before colliding with the active display AH.
In the scene of (g) in FIG. 31B (B), the active display AH in the scene of (f) in FIG. 31B (B) disappears without colliding with the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1, and thus active. The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display form of “sphere”. In addition, in the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 32A (A) and (e) to (f) in FIG. 32B (A) are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 32B and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (B). 32A and 32B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 32A (A) and FIG. 32B (A) show the successful effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (thickness “extremely thick”)) is set. 32A (B) and FIG. 32B (B) represent failure effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. (No change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  FIG. 32A (A) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, Or, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene.

  Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 32A (A), the display is suspended (active display AH) in the buffer number “1” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. The display mode of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) (additional display mode “white”) is stored as the production content corresponding to In the buffer number “2” of the buffer 194C, the display mode of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning the hold display H1 (additional display mode “white”) is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number “3” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194 </ b> C is determined at the start winning of the hold display H <b> 2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H <b> 2. The display mode of the hold display H2 (additional display mode “white”) is stored, and the buffer number “4” of the first prefetch preview buffer 194C is activated as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning a prize (additional display mode “white”) is stored.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 32A (A), active display of active display AH (information corresponding to hold information immediately before active display AH is displayed as active display AH in active display area AHA) is started. The effect control CPU 120 starts to change the decorative pattern based on the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1 (non-reach (losing))” designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.
In the case of (a) in FIG. 32A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first reserved memory number to “4”. (Step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217), and for determining the special figure display result. The special figure display result is determined using the random value MR1, the jackpot type determination random value MR2, or the like (steps S403 and S404).

  For example, it is assumed that “losing” is determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 selects the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” from the plurality of variation category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result “losing” and the reserved storage number “4” (FIG. 16). ), The variation category is determined based on the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category (step S412). For example, it is assumed that the variation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit))” is determined. The CPU 103 sets transmission of a variation category command that designates the variation category “PB5” (step S413), and executes a command control process (step S17) to specify a variation category command that designates the variation category “PB5”. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Receiving the variation category command for designating the variation category from the main board 11, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the suspension display mode used from the plurality of hold display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variation category. A determination table is selected, and a display mode of a hold display (additional display) to be additionally displayed in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display Display mode) is determined.
The effect control CPU 120 determines the hold effect determination processing in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The contents (display mode when added) are stored.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start-winning memory display area in the active display area AHA. It is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 32A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a fluctuation that executes the second system change effect. In FIG. 32A (A) (c), reach is established after variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 32A (A) (b), and the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design display area 5R are displayed. This is a scene where the decorative pattern is a reach.
The scene of (d) of FIG. 32A (A) is an example when the 2nd system | strain change effect is performed after reach establishment (for example, the timing 3 of FIG. 28). In (d) of FIG. 32A (A), an arrow Y2 on which characters of “hot heat” are drawn is displayed at the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect.
32A (B) (a) to FIG. 32A (B) (d) are the same as FIG. 32A (A) (a) to FIG. 32A (A) (d).
That is, the second system change from (b) of FIG. 32A (A) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 32A (B) to (d) of FIG. 32A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

In the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene of (f) of FIG. 32B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “extremely thick”. The display mode is changed.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene of (f) of FIG. 32B (B), the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (e) of FIG. 32A (B). “Normal” display mode remains unchanged.
Note that the active display change effect may also be executed after the reach has been established for the second system change effect. Similarly, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be executed after the reach is established.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 33A and (g) to (h) in FIG. 33B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. 33A and 33B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 represents that the decorative design is changing. 33A and 33B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B in that they are pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  33A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

In FIG. 33A (c), the decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R after reaching the variable display in the scene of (b) in FIG. This is a scene that is stopped and displayed in a different display mode.
In the scene of (d) of FIG. 33A, the chance symbol indicated as “opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol in the scene of (e) of FIG. 33A. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of FIG. 33A (f), all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display).

In (g) of FIG. 33B, an arrow Y2 on which characters of “hot heat” are drawn is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect.
From (a) of FIG. 33A to (g) of FIG. 33B is a common effect executed in common by the successful effect and the failed effect in the second system change effect.

In the scene of (h) of FIG. 33B, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 33B (g) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW It is a scene colliding with.
In the scene of (i) of FIG. 33B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (h) of FIG. 33B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”. ing. In addition, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW has changed as the display mode of “extremely thick”, the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are in a reach mode.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 34A and (g) to (j) in FIG. 34B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. 34A and 34B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 34A and 34B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (change present (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B in that they are pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  34A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

FIG. 34A (c) shows that reach is established after variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 34 (b), and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are reached. This is a scene that is stopped and displayed in a manner.
In the scene of (d) of FIG. 34A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol in the scene of (e) of FIG. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (f) in FIG. 34A, all temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display).

Further, in (f) of FIG. 34A, an arrow Y2 in which the characters “Intense heat” is drawn is displayed on the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect.
Here, (a) in FIG. 34A to (f) in FIG. 34A are common effects that are executed in common by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

In the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 34B (f) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene of collision with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene of (h) of FIG. 34B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (g) of FIG. 34B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”. This is a scene in which the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in a reach mode.
In the scene (i) of FIG. 34B, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “extremely thick”, the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are displayed. Is in the reach mode, a chance symbol is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the scene (j) of FIG. 34B, this chance symbol is displayed temporarily without stopping temporarily in the decorative symbol display area 5C. The decorative design of the area 5L and the decorative design of the decorative design display area 5R are determined as the reach mode.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 35A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 35B are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. 35A and 35B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 35A and 35B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B are different in reach establishment timing. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  35A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

FIG. 35A (c) shows an arrow Y2 in which the characters “Intense heat” are drawn on the upper left of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 35A (b). Is displayed. Here, (a) in FIG. 35A to (c) in FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.
In the scene (d) of FIG. 35A, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene of collision with the active display frame AHW.
In the scene of (e) of FIG. 35A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of “extremely thick”, and the decorative symbol display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the reach mode.

In the scene of (f) of FIG. 35A, the chance symbol described as “Opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol in the scene of FIG. 35B (g) is a decorative symbol. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of (h) in FIG. 35B, all temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display).
Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 35B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach manner.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 36A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 36B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIGS. 36A and 36B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (change present (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B is different from the display operation example shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B in the reach establishment timing. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  36A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or A special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. .

FIG. 36A (c) shows an arrow Y2 in which the characters “Intense heat” are drawn on the upper left of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 36A (b). Is displayed. Here, (a) in FIG. 35A to (c) in FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.
In the scene of FIG. 36A (d), the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene of collision with the active display frame AHW.
36A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of “extremely thick”, and the decorative symbol display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed in a reach manner.

In the scene of (f) of FIG. 36A, the chance symbol described as “Opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C on the image display device 5 by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene of (g) of FIG. 36B. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene of FIG. 36B (h), all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display).
Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 36B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach manner.

  Here, in FIGS. 36A and 36B, examples of scenes in which the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach manner are shown in FIGS. 36A (e) and 36B (i). However, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, when the quasi-continuous fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, “timing 3” in FIG. 28 is treated as the timing in FIG. 36B (i). That is, the reach establishment in FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B means that the pseudo-continuous change has ended and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach manner. It is the scene of i).

  29 to 36, the success effect can be executed at the timing when the active display change effect (first system change effect, second system change effect, first system change effect, and second system change effect) is executed. When the degree of expectation is different, for example, there is an active display change effect executed at the first timing and an active display change effect executed at the second timing later than the first timing in the fluctuation, the expectation is executed at the second timing. This means that the degree of expectation that a successful effect in the active display change effect can be executed is high.

(Modification)
Note that the display mode of the hold display does not have to be a display mode that represents the degree of expectation for the big hit as shown in FIG. 24, and is different from the normal mode that is the normal (default, initial color) display mode and the normal mode. The special aspect may include a first special aspect and a second special aspect that are different from the normal aspect and the special aspect. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 37, 38, and 39.

For example, instead of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 24, another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 may be used.
FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. The ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables corresponding to the change categories. FIG. 37A shows the hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (abbreviation / non-reach loss)” or the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by a determination table. FIG. 37 (B) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 37 (C) shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (lost))” among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 37D shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (losing)) among the above seven types. 37 (E) shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above seven types. 37 is a setting example (H-TBL5) of an aspect determination ratio, and Fig. 37 (F) shows a hold selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the above seven types. Fig. 37G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination mode of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table, Fig. 37 (G) shows the variation category "PB5 (superly) among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when “H β (big hit))”.

  Comparing FIG. 37 with FIG. 24, the difference is that a part of the determination ratio for “white” in each hold display mode determination table in FIG. 24 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. 37. Specifically, the determination ratio for “white” in each hold display mode determination table is 4: 1 between the determination ratio for “white” and the determination ratio for “gray” in each hold display mode determination table of FIG. This is a setting example in which a determination ratio is assigned. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode has the same degree of expectation for the jackpot as the normal mode, but when the “gray” hold display becomes the active display, the ratio of executing the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is It is a display mode representing high.

  In addition, in the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode). Unlike the aspect and the special aspect, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than that of the first special aspect). A red color or the like that is a third special mode having a different level of expectation (for example, a higher level of expectation for jackpot than the second special mode) may be included.

  For example, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 uses a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 37 based on the change category specified by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11. A hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the determination tables, and added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. What is necessary is just to determine the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to display.

  Then, after executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (step S160). S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determining process to the first start prize corresponding to the first start prize buffer number in the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (the first start winning reception command buffer 194A concerned). Based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the start winning prize), a new hold display is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL. A first hold addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning storage display area 5HL to display the hold display in the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set presentation control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first holding effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL.

  And in the process of step S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 25, when determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, or when executing the active display change effect, In the case of the process for determining whether to execute the active display change effect, or the active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect, the process for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed, Processing for determining the timing for executing the active display change effect, processing for setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process for determining which active display change effect to execute when executing an active display change effect will be described. To do. When the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 is used, the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. . Here, the setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the determination ratio setting example based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. Depending on whether or not the display mode of the display is a special mode, a different example of referring to a determination ratio setting example based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table is different.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating another setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 38 (A) is a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode (gray). FIG. 38B is a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the active display display mode corresponding to the variation is a special mode (gray).
Each setting example shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) is similar to the setting example shown in FIG. 26, and whether or not the active display change effect is executed or when the active display change effect is executed. It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the production | generation aspect of an active display change production.
Each setting example shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute active display change effects in the active display change effect execution determination table. Numerical values (determined values) are assigned to “execution present” and “execution non-execution”, respectively, at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B), respectively. In the “execution present” in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute active display change effect is “first system”. For each of “change effect”, “second system change effect”, and “first system change effect and second system change effect”, determinations as shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B, respectively. Assigned in percentage.

  “Execution present” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. “Execution” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are active display changes. Indicates that it is performed as a production. “No execution” indicates that no active display change effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is a fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3 shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 38, when the variation patterns (variable display patterns) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command are the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, “no execution” is 100. %, Indicating that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect is executed. In addition, when an active display change effect is executed (in the case of “Execution” in FIGS. 38A and 38B), when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ), The proportion of execution of the first system change effect is higher than that of the second system change effect. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of the first system change effect being executed is higher than that when the variation pattern is “losing” than the second system change effect. In addition, when the reach becomes hot (for example, super reach), the ratio of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the variation pattern is “losing”.

In addition, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the variation is in a special mode, the determination ratio of whether or not the active display change effect is executed differs, and when the active display corresponding to the variation is in a special mode, the variation Compared with the case where the active display corresponding to is not in a special mode, the determination ratio at which the active display change effect is executed is higher.
In addition, the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 26 is not considered, the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 38A is considered, and the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode, and FIG. In consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 38, when the active display corresponding to the variation is the special mode, the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. The determination ratio in which the active display change effect is executed increases in the order of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. ing.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random number MR7 for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute an active display change effect according to the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display), and when executing an active display change effect, Of these, which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined to be “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And “second system change effect” may be determined.

  Note that the graphic group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined such that the degree of expectation for the big hit changes depending on the combination of the figures constituting the graphic group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio based on the first system detail pattern determination table when the first system change effect is executed.
In each setting example shown in FIG. 39, the first system detail pattern determination table for the first system change effect includes, for example, 10 types of first system detail patterns SHP1 corresponding to combinations of three figures of a triangle, a pentagon, and a star. ~ SHP10 is included. The first system detail pattern is a case where only the first system change effect is executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 27A is determined), and the first system change effect. Reference is made when both the second system change effect is executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 27C is determined).

  In the first system detail pattern, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detail pattern is determined by an active display change effect pattern as shown in FIG. Assigned.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores a first system detail pattern as an effect mode of 10 types of first system change effects corresponding to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 39, the first system detail pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are all composed of triangles. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination ratio determined when reaching a non-hot reach (eg, normal reach) in FIG. 27, and when reaching a non-hot reach (eg, normal reach), The determination ratio determined for the first system detail pattern SHP1 is higher than when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is reached. In addition, the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is determined by the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 27, and the details of the first system that can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined variation A pattern is determined.

Similarly, the first system detail pattern “SHP2” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of pentagons, triangles, and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP3” This is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the group Y1 are composed of pentagons, pentagons, and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP4” has three figures constituting the figure group Y1 as pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detail pattern “SHP5” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are constituted by stars, triangles, and triangles. The detailed pattern “SHP6” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, pentagons, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern “SH” "7" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detail pattern "SHP8" has three figures constituting the figure group Y1. This is an effect pattern when composed of stars, stars, triangles and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP9” is an effect when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars and pentagons. The first system detail pattern “SHP10” is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars.
According to the example shown in the drawing, the degree of expectation that a successful effect can be executed differs depending on the combination of figures constituting the figure group Y1.

37 and 38, when the special mode is considered, when the active display change effect is executed for the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the special mode, the common effect described above is performed. It may be executed as a suggestion effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect, or an suggestion effect that suggests an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special manner (for example, a success effect and a failure effect) You may make it perform the suggestion effect which suggests the common effect performed in common with a production in the same or different mode.
In addition, when considering a special mode as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. However, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is a special mode. In some cases, a hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode as the active display change effect may be executed for the hold display displayed in the special mode.

  In FIG. 39, in the figure group Y1 configured by the initial display (combination), the figure to be erased in the common effect may be erased from the figure that is the display mode of the active display with low expectation. For example, when the first system detail pattern SHP6 is determined as a successful effect, the display mode after the successful effect is executed among the graphic group composed of three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle” Of the two other than the figure (for example, “pentagon”), the figure with the low expectation level (for example, “triangle”) is deleted first, and the figure with the low expectation level (for example, “star”) is deleted next. If it is a failure production, among the group of figures composed of three figures, "star", "pentagon", and "triangle", "triangle", "pentagon", and "star" It may be deleted.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment has a variable display (for example, a special figure) after the game medium has passed through a start area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second start winning opening, etc.) provided in the game area. Variable display of decorative information, variable display of decorative design, special display and variable display of decorative design, etc. A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine) that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on variable display means for deriving and displaying a definite special symbol or the like) 1 and the like, and the variable storage of the identification information for which the game medium has passed through the start area but the variable display start condition is not satisfied, holds storage information for storing the hold information up to a predetermined upper limit. For example, 1 special figure storage unit 151A, second special figure storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second starting winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.), and the storage stored in the storage unit A hold display means for performing a hold display for each piece of information in a predetermined display mode (for example, a process of adding a hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the first hold addition process of step S162, In the second hold addition process, a process for adding a hold display to the second start winning memory display area 5HR and the like, and a variable display start condition is satisfied, and the digestion according to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is performed. A special image representing information including the time display (for example, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA). The active display or a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display or the like is provided in a predetermined area (for example, the active display area AHA), for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5. In the display area AHA, at least an active display AH is displayed, and in addition to the active display AH, an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH, a region including a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW, etc. A common effect (for example, a first effect) executed in common when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed during execution of the variable display of the identification information and the image display means. In the one system change effect, the effect before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display, and the second system change effect. In the production effect, an effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display, and a success effect (for example, a first system change effect, for example) that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect. In the effect that the figure of the shape “star” in the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and changes to the star display mode, or the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and becomes active. An effect in which the line thickness of the display frame changes, an effect in which both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed to change the display mode such as active display or active display frame) or the like A failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image (for example, in the first system change effect, one of the shapes “star” in the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display. In an effect that disappears before and the display mode of the active display does not change, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the thickness of the line of the active display frame An execution that can execute an effect that does not change, an effect that does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display frame and the active display frame by executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect. And the ratio of executing the successful effect differs depending on at which timing the common effect is executed among a plurality of timings during execution of variable display of the identification information.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine pays attention to the execution timing of the common effect that determines whether the display mode of the special image representing the information including the display at the time of digestion corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is changed. Can be made. Further, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect can be executed may include before and after the reach display mode that constitutes a part of the specific display result is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after reach establishment).

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the common effect is performed at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display as compared with the case where the common effect is performed at the first timing of variable display of the identification information being executed. In the case of execution, the rate at which the success effect is executed may be higher.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information being executed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, prior determination means for deciding whether or not to use the specific display result before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display (for example, in the processing of step S412 by the CPU 103, the special figure display result and the pending storage) 17 is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 17, and the variation category is determined based on the selected variation category determination table and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. In the winning random number determination process in step S220, a special figure display result, a process for determining the jackpot type, etc.), and before the determination by the predetermining means, stored in the holding storage means Specific determination means for determining whether or not the variable display result based on the hold information is the specific display result (for example, step S1) In the special symbol normal processing of 0, processing for determining whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed) The execution execution means capable of executing the hold notice effect that displays the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the determination target of the specific determination means in any one of a plurality of display forms, and the display form of the hold display A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating whether or not to change, the display mode of the hold display is a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, the normal mode and the special mode Including the first special mode and the second special mode, which are different from the mode, the effect execution unit becomes the determination target of the specific determination unit at a different rate according to the determination result of the specific determination unit Pending information Is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and the display is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings. The suggestion effect executing means may execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. Good.

  According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased.

  In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. However, the hold change effect, which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. May be.

Moreover, after the hold display is displayed in a special manner as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, for example, the execution ratio for executing the above-described common effect as a suggestion effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect is different. After the hold display is displayed in a special manner, the suggestion effect that suggests the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, the success effect and the failure effect are common) For example, it may be set higher so that the execution ratio of executing the suggestion effect that suggests the common effect to be executed in the same or different manner is different.
When the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 is a special mode, For example, it may be made higher so that the execution ratio for executing the hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode is different.

  In the above description, the main notice effect such as the active display change effect has been described. However, if the main notice effect is not affected, the notice effect such as another main notice effect or the pre-read notice effect is executed with the same variation. Alternatively, when the main notice effect such as other main notice effect or pre-read notice effect is not affected, the main notice effect may be executed with the same variation. Here, the case where there is no influence is that the execution time for executing each notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change when executing a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) in the change. Or in the case where a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) are executed, it is difficult for the player to see due to the effect form of each notice effect.

  In the above description, the active display change effect with respect to the active display has been described. For example, a character with a hammer appears as a hold effect with respect to the hold display, and an action effect is performed by hitting the first hold display with a hammer. This is a decorative design when the display mode of the hold display is changed, or when the decorative design is composed of a total of nine types of eight types of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” and one character image. It may be an effect mode in which the character jumps out of the character image and the action effect is executed on the target hold display.

  In the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described. However, it is determined whether to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example based on the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIG. 24 or 37, and the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as next fluctuation.

  In the above description, as the first system change effect, an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by a graphic group constituted by a combination of a plurality of figures, and as the second system change effect, the display mode of the active display frame is indicated by an arrow. However, it does not have to be a graphic or an arrow. For example, it is an effect that changes the display mode of a special image including an active display or an active display frame by making a character appear. Also good.

  In the above description, an example in which the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed (display mode at the time of addition) is white has been described. However, as in the setting example based on the hold display mode determination table as illustrated in FIGS. For example, the display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed in either four colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white, gray). Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed according to the display mode of 3 colors or less or 6 colors or more, and the color of the hold display or the hold display is drawn. The display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by characters or symbols, or the hold display may be displayed so as to be additionally displayed according to the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character type, etc.) Display mode May be constant, hold display of motion (for example, the operation pattern of the character in the hold display of character) may determine the hold display of the display mode to be added displayed by like.

  In the above description, the active display may be deleted from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative symbol, or the active display is deleted when the variation of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped. Alternatively, the active display may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation.

  In the above description, after a common effect is performed on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, a display mode of a special image representing information including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display Although an example of executing a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image representing information including the active display corresponding to the successful display corresponding to the variable display and the hold display corresponding to the variable display has been described, the start winning storage display area 5H Successful display or display mode of the hold display that changes the display mode of the hold display after executing the common effect that is executed in common between the success display and the failure display for any of the hold displays displayed in You may perform the failure production which does not change.

In addition, after performing a success or failure effect on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display corresponds to the hold display. A success effect or a failure effect may be further executed on the special image representing the information including the active display.
In this case, for example, when there is a start prize at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, each of the hold displays displayed in the start prize storage display area 5H at step 160 and step 163 in FIG. On the other hand, the presence / absence of execution of the success or failure effect for the hold display, the effect mode, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the variable category, and the active display corresponding to each hold display. As shown in FIG. 10, the success / failure performance execution / non-execution of the special image representing the information including the active display at that time, the display mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. are determined according to the variation category. What is necessary is just to memorize | store the determined content in the 1st prefetch notice buffer 194C and the 2nd prefetch notice buffer 194D.

  In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 in which the character “Intense heat” is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn in the arrow Y2, A character may be drawn, or a character or the like may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect forms as the second system change effect, the success effect depends on which of the second system change effects is selected among the plurality of types of second system change effects. The expected degree of execution may be different. Further, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests a display mode of the special image after execution of the successful effect by the effect mode of the second system change effect.

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, when the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, even if the hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H If there is a hold display displayed in a special manner in any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, either the hold display displayed in the start win memory display area 5H or the active display On the other hand, a hold change effect or an active display change effect may be executed.

  For example, either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect of changing the color of active display in the active display mode. In this case, for example, the first system change effect that changes the shape and the second system change effect that changes the line thickness of the active display frame are displayed on the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. The display mode of the active display so as to be a display mode of a color with a high expectation of jackpot compared to the color of the hold display that has been displayed (for example, a color such as yellow or red in the case of the hold display displayed in blue) The color at may be changed.

  For example, FIG. 27A to FIG. 27 for each color of the active display, for example, for each color of the active display, so that the degree of expectation that the successful presentation is executed differs depending on the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. A setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode set as shown in (C) may be used, and a successful production for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. An example of setting the display mode determination ratio that is set so that the display ratio of the active display such as the color of the active display after the display is different may be used.

  For example, 45% like the ratio of “executed” and “not executed” of the active display change effect of the variation pattern “PA4-X” in the setting example of the determination ratio in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table in FIG. (The sum of the first system change effect 15%, the second system change effect 10%, the first system change effect 20%, and the second system change effect 20%) In this embodiment, the ratio may be set for each, and the ratio of “executed” and “not executed” is 0% to 100% as in the variation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. The ratio according to the above may be set such that one of a plurality is set as 0%.

  For example, in the probability change control, a gaming machine that provides a specific area in the special winning opening in advance and controls the game to a certain probability state based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area. For example, based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a game ball enters a specific area within the big winning opening by being assigned to multiple types of big hit types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. It may be a gaming machine that controls to an easy gaming state and controls to a certain change state based on the passing of the game ball through this specific area.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various presentation operations including the display operation of the presentation image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  For example, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values having a size specified from the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, and the given game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a score or a game score given by winning a game.

  In other words, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for displaying and displaying the display result is provided. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  Next, with reference to FIG.40 and FIG.41, the modification provided with the movable apparatus which can operate | move outside the housing | casing of the pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 40, staging devices 300L and 300R that are operable to protrude outward from the surface of the gaming machine frame 3 are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It has been. The rendering devices 300L and 300R only need to have the same structure. In this case, the rendering devices 300L and 300R may be collectively referred to as the rendering device 300. Alternatively, the rendering devices 300L and 300R may have different structures.

  The rendering devices 300L and 300R include a guide member connected to the rotation shaft of the stepping motor via various gears, and the rotation of the stepping motor is transmitted to the guide member, and the guide member rotates. As such a guide member, a first guide member and a second guide member are provided. The first guide member engages with the first slide member 310, and the second guide member engages with the second slide member 340. ing. As the stepping motor rotates, the first guide member rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, a first rotation direction such as a clockwise direction), so that the first slide member 310 advances (projects) forward, while the first guide When the member rotates in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, the second rotation direction such as counterclockwise), the first slide member 310 is retracted (retracted) backward. In addition, as the stepping motor rotates, the second guide member rotates in the first rotation direction, so that the second slide member 340 moves forward (protrudes), while the second guide member is in the first rotation direction. The second slide member 340 is retracted (retreated) backward by rotating in the second rotation direction opposite to the reverse direction. In this way, the rendering devices 300L and 300R move between a protruding position (advance position) protruding outward from the gaming machine frame 3 and a retracted position (retracted position) accommodated in the gaming machine frame 3. A first slide member 310 and a second slide member 340 that are operable in this manner are provided. As a result, the rendering devices 300L and 300R can change in the direction of advancing to the near side as seen from the player side within the range of the gaming machine frame 3. Note that the timing at which the first slide member 310 starts operation (advancement or retraction) and the timing at which the second slide member 340 starts operation (advancement or retraction) may be the same timing or different from each other. It may be timing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 41A, in the initial state before the operation, in the rendering devices 300L and 300R, the retracted position (retracted) where the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 are accommodated in the gaming machine frame 3 Position). Thereafter, with the rotation of the stepping motor, first, as shown in FIG. 41B, the first slide member 310 starts to advance (project) while rotating. At this time, the second slide member 340 only rotates without advancing until it reaches a predetermined rotation angle. Subsequently, when a predetermined rotation angle is reached, the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 advance (project) while rotating together. As the rotation angle further increases, as shown in FIG. 41C, the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 move to the final projecting position (advance position). As described above, with the rotation of the stepping motor, firstly, the first operation start timing for starting the operation of the first slide member 310 is reached, and then the second operation start timing for starting the operation of the second slide member 340. The internal structure of the first slide member and the second slide member may be formed.

  The rendering devices 300L and 300R are not limited to those capable of operating such that the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 protrude or retract as the stepping motor rotates. As an example, the rendering devices 300L and 300R may be operable so that the movable member protrudes outward or retracts inward from the gaming machine frame 3 in response to excitation and demagnetization of the solenoid. . In this case, the solenoid is provided with a drive shaft that is attracted when the solenoid is excited and a spring for returning the drive shaft when the solenoid is demagnetized. The reciprocating member connected with a connection part should just be attached. Even in this way, the rendering devices 300L and 300R can change in the direction of advancing to the near side as seen from the player side within the range of the gaming machine frame 3. As another example, the production devices 300L and 300R advance in the ceiling direction (vertically upward direction) within the range of the gaming machine frame 3 in the vicinity of the upper plate and the push button 31B below the gaming area. It may change.

  As yet another example, the rendering device 300L includes a left-side moving unit that rotates to a predetermined angle with the vicinity of the left end in the left-right direction as a central axis (rotation axis), and the rendering device 300R has a central axis (near the right end in the left-right direction). It may be provided with a right side moving part that rotates to a predetermined angle as the rotation axis. In this case, the left side moving unit and the right side moving unit are connected to the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state (stored state in the retracted position) stored in the gaming machine frame 3 (one front surface). And an outer surface formed so as to be hidden in the gaming machine frame 3 when in the stowed state and rotated to a predetermined angle and open (deployed state at the protruding position). Thus, it is only necessary to provide an inner surface that is continuous with the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3. When in the unfolded state, the outer surfaces of the left moving unit and the right moving unit are not in close contact with the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and stop at a position where they can be seen from the outside, and continue to the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3. Alternatively, it may be in close contact with the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 so that it cannot be viewed from the player side. Both the left side moving part and the right side moving part rotate up to a predetermined angle (for example, 90 degrees with respect to the stored state) around the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the gaming machine frame 3 as a central axis (rotating axis). It may have a changeable structure. In this case, the outer surfaces of the left moving unit and the right moving unit are formed so as to be continuous with the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 (part of the front surface is configured) when the left moving unit and the right moving unit are stored. On the other hand, when in the unfolded state, the outer surface of the left moving unit and the outer surface of the right moving unit are in close contact with each other, and the inner surface of the left moving unit and the inner surface of the right moving unit are exposed, thereby having a predetermined shape and color. The model may be configured to appear. Alternatively, the left side moving unit and the right side moving unit both rotate up to a predetermined angle at the upper part of the gaming machine frame 3 with the vicinity of the upper end, the vicinity of the center, or the vicinity of the lower end in the vertical direction as the central axis (rotation axis). It may have a changeable structure.

  In addition, a hook-shaped projecting member that is fixedly formed so as to project to the near side when viewed from the player side is provided on the entire upper part of the gaming machine frame 3. The rendering device 300R is provided with a left-side moving part that rotates to a predetermined angle with the center in the center as a central axis (rotation axis). You may provide the right side moving part to rotate. In this case, the left side moving part and the right side moving part are continuous with the upper surface of the protruding member when stored in the protruding member (closed state in the retracted position). The outer surface formed so as to be hidden and hidden inside the protruding member when in the retracted state and rotated to a predetermined angle (for example, 90 degrees with respect to the retracted state) and opened (deployed state at the protruding position) In this case, an inner surface that is exposed and is continuous with the upper surface or the side surface of the protruding member may be provided. When the left moving unit and the right moving unit are in the unfolded state, the outer surface of the left moving unit and the outer surface of the right moving unit are in close contact with each other, and the inner surface of the left moving unit and the inner surface of the right moving unit are exposed. A model having the shape or color may appear.

  The upper surface of the projecting member is not limited to one that changes between the retracted position (retracted position) and the deployed state (projected position), but is stored on the lower surface of the projecting member (the direction toward the game board 2 or the lower plate). It may be changed between (retracted position) and deployed state. In addition, the left moving part and the right moving part are centered on the upper or lower surface of the protruding member around the left end and the right end in the left-right direction, or near the front end, the center, and the rear end in the front-rear direction. It may have a structure that can change so as to rotate to a predetermined angle as the rotation axis. Alternatively, effect devices 300L and 300R including the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 may be provided at predetermined positions on the upper surface or the lower surface of the protruding member. When the effect devices 300L and 300R operating on the lower surface of the bowl-shaped projecting member provided on the entire upper portion of the gaming machine frame 3 change from the stored state (retracted position) to the expanded state (projected position), For example, the player may advance in the floor direction (vertically downward) so as to avoid the front surface of the game area formed by the game board 2. Alternatively, for example, it is possible to advance in the game area direction (downwardly obliquely) and advance to the front of the game area so that a part of the game area formed by the game board 2 is hidden.

  Further, the projecting member is not limited to the one formed in a bowl shape over the entire upper part of the gaming machine frame 3, for example, at least one of the left side and the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3 It may be fixedly formed so as to protrude to the near side when viewed from the person side. The protruding member may be formed as a model having a specific shape or color. For example, when a projecting member is provided on the right side of the game area, the rendering devices 300L and 300R that operate on the left surface of the projecting member change from the stored state (retracted position) to the expanded state (projected position). In addition, the game board 2 may advance so as to avoid the front of the game area formed by the game board 2, or may advance to the front of the game area so that a part of the game area formed by the game board 2 is hidden.

  When the production devices 300L and 300R advance to the front of the game area formed by the game board 2, for example, a path through which a game ball can pass in the game area, a special symbol (the first special symbol display device 4A, the first 2 special symbol display device 4B) and decorative symbols ("left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) in the display area of the image display device 5, Display of first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B) and hold display (first start winning memory display area 5HL, second start winning memory display area 5HR in the display area of image display device 5), image display device The specific notification regarding the progress of the game and the progress of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as display of the direction of launching the game ball (right-handed instruction, left-handed instruction) in the display area 5 is not hindered. , The advancing direction and advancement of the movable member may be set. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the player from misidentifying the progress of the game and the progress of the production.

  In this way, the rendering devices 300L and 300R constitute a part of the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first state (for example, the retracted state in the retracted position) and the second state (for example, protruding) different from the first state It is only necessary to be able to change to the developed state at the position. It should be noted that the production devices that constitute a part of the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can change between the first state and the second state are not limited to two production devices such as the production devices 300L and 300R. One effect device may be provided, and three or more effect devices may be provided.

  The rendering devices 300L and 300R start the operation when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied, and stop the operation when the operation end condition is satisfied. For example, when the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 are in the stored state (retracted position) in the rendering devices 300L and 300R, a specific type of super reach (for example, a big hit expectation degree) among the plurality of types of super reach. The first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 start to change from the stored state (retracted position) to the deployed state (projected position) immediately before the start of the operation. . When the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 reach the deployed state (projection position) and the operation stop condition is satisfied, the operations of the effect devices 300L and 300R are stopped. Thereafter, when the variable display result is “losing”, the operation start condition is satisfied, and the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 are changed from the expanded state (protruded position) to the retracted state (retracted position). Initiate change. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, part or all of the period related to the execution of the big hit game, such as the period during which the fanfare screen is displayed or the period during which the big hit game state is controlled Then, the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 are maintained in the unfolded state (projecting position). The operation start condition is satisfied with the end of such a period, and the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 start to change from the deployed state (projection position) to the housed state (retracted position). When the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 reach the storage state (retracted position) and the operation stop condition is satisfied, the operations of the effect devices 300L and 300R are stopped.

  The operation start condition when the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 are in the housed state (retracted position) is not limited to that established in relation to the start of a specific type of super reach. Those that are established in relation to the variable display result being a “big hit”, those that are established in connection with the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 being in a special gaming state (for example, a probable variation state), a customer waiting demonstration display In relation to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the progress of the production, in addition to what is established in connection with reaching a predetermined operation start time during execution of the (demonstration display) or during the execution of the game, Alternatively, an arbitrary condition may be set in advance as the operation start condition without being related to the progress of the game or the progress of the effect.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a configuration for detecting whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the operation of the effect devices 300L and 300R. As an example, an operation detection sensor may be arranged on the main body and the periphery of the effect devices 300L and 300R so that the operation state of the effect devices 300L and 300R can be detected. The motion detection sensor is configured by using, for example, an infrared sensor or an optical sensor, and infrared rays or visible light output from a predetermined transmitter (light emitting member) is transmitted to a predetermined part of the effect devices 300L and 300R or the effect devices 300L and 300R. It is only necessary to detect the operation position of the rendering devices 300L and 300R and the presence or absence of an obstacle (including a human body) by irradiating the surroundings and detecting the reflected light. Alternatively, the motion detection sensor may be configured using, for example, a touch sensor, and may detect contact of the human body that interferes with the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R by detecting changes in capacitance due to contact with the human body. . Alternatively, the motion detection sensor is configured by using, for example, a torque sensor or a rotary encoder, and detects the load amount or the rotation amount of the stepping motor, thereby operating positions and obstacles (including a human body) of the rendering devices 300L and 300R. What is necessary is just to be able to detect the presence or absence.

  Control may be performed to stop the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R when an abnormality occurs in the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may stop the operations of the effect devices 300L and 300R by stopping the rotation of the stepping motor connected to the effect devices 300L and 300R when an operation abnormality occurs. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation of the effect devices 300L and 300R, the operation of the effect devices 300L and 300R is stopped, thereby suppressing the pinching associated with the operation of the effect devices 300L and 300R, and the effect device 300L. , The failure (breakage) of the movable member in 300R, the breakage of the obstacle touching the rendering devices 300L and 300R, or the injury of the player can be prevented.

  When an abnormality occurs in the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R, control for notifying the occurrence of the abnormality may be performed. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control causes the speaker 8L to display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123 and to transmit a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 when an operation abnormality occurs. , By outputting sound and warning sound from 8R, lighting a predetermined warning lamp by transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, or combining a part or all of these, for example, What is necessary is just to alert | report the generation | occurrence | production of operation | movement abnormality so that a player etc. can recognize, such as a message of "an accessory abnormality occurrence".

  Whether or not the production devices 300L and 300R are operated, and the operation amount of the production devices 300L and 300R may be switched according to settings on the game store side or the player side. For example, in a game store, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1, a game information display device, and a card unit are arranged on a gaming machine installation island. The game information display device displays game information (for example, a game state, the number of starts, the number of jackpots, etc.) in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the player. The game information display device is also provided with a call button and a call lamp for calling a shop clerk. The card unit performs at least a game value process (lending process) for causing a game value (prepaid frequency) recorded on a game recording medium such as a prepaid card to be used for a game in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be executed. A game ball corresponding to the amount may be lent out in accordance with coin insertion or cash insertion.

  In such a game store, when the effect devices 300L and 300R are operated, display of the game information display device, operation of the calling lamp, operation of the card unit, and the like may be hindered. Therefore, setting may be made so that the rendering devices 300L and 300R are not operated by setting on the game store side. Alternatively, the motion amount of the rendering devices 300L and 300R may be set to be a limited motion amount that is smaller than the initial specific motion amount. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the display of the game information display device, the operation of the calling lamp, the operation of the card unit, and the like from being hindered.

  Further, by operating the rendering devices 300L and 300R that constitute a part of the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1, players in the vicinity other than the player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily recognized. Production will be performed. The interest in the game can be increased by making the surrounding players pay attention to such effects. On the other hand, among the players who play a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1, there are players who do not want to produce a noticeable effect by operating the effect devices 300L and 300R. Therefore, it may be possible to make settings so that the production devices 300L and 300R are not operated by setting on the player side. Alternatively, the motion amount of the rendering devices 300L and 300R may be set to be a limited motion amount that is smaller than the initial specific motion amount. Thereby, an appropriate effect can be executed according to the player's preference.

  As a configuration for setting the presence / absence of the motion and the motion amount in the rendering devices 300L and 300R, for example, an operation setting screen is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of a customer waiting demonstration display (demonstration display). The operation setting screen may be displayed together with the volume luminance setting screen for setting the volume and luminance, or the operation setting is performed by operating the stick controller 31A for production and the push button 31B while the volume luminance setting screen is displayed. You may enable it to select the display of a screen. If the operation signal from the stick controller 31A or the like is input, the effect control CPU 120 inputs the operation amount setting value according to the operation. The operation amount setting value is “0” when the rendering devices 300L and 300R are not operated, for example, and any one of a plurality of steps (for example, 11 steps) is set so that the specific operation amount of the initial setting is “10”. It is only necessary that the operation amount can be set. The effect control CPU 120 stores the input operation amount setting value in a setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122. When the operation start conditions of the effect devices 300L and 300R are satisfied, the operation amount setting value is read out from the stored contents of the setting value storage area by the effect control CPU 120, and the rotation of the stepping motor corresponds to the read operation amount setting value. What is necessary is just to determine quantity.

  When setting the presence / absence and amount of motion in the production devices 300L and 300R by the player side setting, the image display device 5 can be set according to the display of the operation setting screen, while the game store side setting. When setting the presence / absence and amount of motion in the rendering devices 300L and 300R, a setting changeover switch arranged on the rendering control board 12 so as to face the back direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set inside the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be settable by operation. As described above, a configuration for performing operation settings of the rendering devices 300L and 300R by operation of the player and a configuration for performing operation settings of the rendering devices 300L and 300R by operation of the game clerk are provided. Good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the setting is on the player side or the game store side, the presence / absence of the operation and the operation amount in the effect devices 300L and 300R can be set according to the display of the operation setting screen on the image display device 5. Also good. In addition, a player setting screen and a game store setting screen are provided as operation setting screens, and any setting screen can be displayed on the common image display device 5, but which setting screen is displayed. Depending on whether it is set by a player's operation or the like, it may be possible to distinguish and store whether it is a setting by an operation of a game store clerk or the like.

  In addition to the presence / absence of operation of whether or not the production devices 300L and 300R are operated, and the amount of operation of the production devices 300L and 300R, the frequency at which the production devices 300L and 300R are operated depends on the settings on the game store side or the player side , It may be switched. For example, when the operation setting screen is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation frequency setting value according to an operation if an operation signal is input from the stick controller 31A or the like. The operation frequency setting value is set in a plurality of stages (for example, 11 stages) so as to be “0” in the case of the lowest frequency and “10” in the case of the highest frequency, depending on the operation frequency of the rendering devices 300L and 300R. It is only necessary that the operation frequency can be set to any of the above. The effect control CPU 120 stores the input operation frequency setting value in a setting value storage area provided in the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 only needs to be able to determine whether or not the operation start conditions of the effect devices 300L and 300R are satisfied at different rates depending on the operation frequency setting value read from the setting value storage area. As an example, when the operation frequency is set to a low frequency, the announcement devices 300L and 300R operate as the notice effect so that the variable display result can be clearly notified that the result is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not the operation start conditions of the rendering devices 300L and 300R are satisfied. On the other hand, when the operation frequency is set to a high frequency, a specific type of super reach is performed including the case where the variable display result is “lost” by operating the rendering devices 300L and 300R. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the operation start conditions of the rendering devices 300L and 300R are established as the notice effect so that the user can be notified that there is a possibility that the action will occur. In this way, not only the frequency at which the effect devices 300L and 300R are operated can be set, but also the game value advantageous to the player (big hit game state, probability change state, suggested by execution of the effect in which the effect devices 300L and 300R operate) The possibility (reliability) to be given (such as presence / absence of time reduction control) may be changed.

  When the rendering devices 300L and 300R are in the expanded state (protruding position), for example, an expansion end control is performed to end the expanded state and change to the stored state by an operation of a player who does not want to stand out. Also good. The effect control CPU 120, when the effect devices 300L and 300R are in the unfolded state (protruding position), the effect devices 300L and 300R according to the detection of a predetermined operation on the effect stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Control may be performed to change the state from the expanded state to the stored state. In addition, it is not limited to what ends stick state controller 31A and push button 31B for production | finishing, and even if the exclusive button for ending an expansion | deployment state is provided in the vicinity of production | presentation apparatus 300L, 300R. Good.

  When the rendering devices 300L and 300R are in the expanded state (projecting position), rendering operation notification control for notifying that the rendering devices 300L and 300R are operating may be performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image via the display control unit 123 when the effect devices 300L and 300R operate, and transmits a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13. By outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, or by combining them, for example, a message such as “Advancement of an accessory” is notified, and the rendering devices 300L and 300R are in the expanded state (projecting position). What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player etc. may become. In addition, when it is possible to execute expansion end control that ends the expansion state and changes to the storage state by the player's operation, when the rendering devices 300L and 300R operate, the stick controller 31A for the rendering and the push button Turn on a light emitter such as a lamp or LED arranged in or around 31B, or turn on a light emitter such as a lamp or LED arranged in or around a dedicated button for ending the unfolded state. Thus, the player or the like may be informed so that the expansion end control can be executed.

  Even if the production operation notification control is executable, if an abnormality occurs in the operation of the production devices 300L and 300R, the production operation notification control is stopped, and the production devices 300L and 300R are in the deployed state (projecting state). It may be prevented from being notified. Alternatively, even when the production operation notification control is executable, for example, when the operation of the production devices 300L and 300R is not performed due to the setting while the operation setting screen is displayed or the operation of the setting changeover switch, the production operation notification control is performed. Execution may be restricted so that the effect devices 300L and 300R are not informed of being in the unfolded state (protruding position). Alternatively, even when the production operation notification control is executable, when the expansion end control is performed according to the player's operation, the production operation notification control is stopped, and the production devices 300L and 300R are in the expanded state (projecting). (Position) may not be notified.

  When the rendering devices 300L and 300R are in the stored state (retracted position), for example, an operation at the time of changing the rendering devices 300L and 300R from the stored state to the expanded state by an operation of a game clerk who performs maintenance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. Control and deployment maintenance control for maintaining the deployment state may be performed. For example, a maintenance setting screen is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The production control CPU 120 controls the rotation of the stepping motor in response to the input of the operation signal from the stick controller 31A or the like when the maintenance setting screen is displayed. Maintenance control may be performed.

  For example, when an operation restriction setting is made so that the operation of the rendering devices 300L and 300R is not performed by the setting while the operation setting screen is displayed or the operation of the setting changeover switch, the operation of the rendering devices 300L and 300R is replaced. Then, a predetermined alternative effect may be executed. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the operation member by transmitting a command (motor drive signal) to a vibration motor built in the operation member such as the effect stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and an effect blowing fan. Command to the stepping motor for operating the effecting member provided inside or outside the game area to send air to the player from a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 By operating the movable member by transmitting (motor drive signal), displaying a special effect image on the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123, or combining some or all of these effects An effect different from when the devices 300L and 300R operate is executed. It may be.

  When the operation devices 300L and 300R stop operating during the transition from the stored state (retracted position) to the expanded state (protruded position), or when the expanded devices (protruded position) are maintained, the effect devices 300L and 300R Until the operation start condition for returning the projector to the retracted state (retracted position) is satisfied, the stepping motors and solenoids incorporated in the rendering devices 300L and 300R may not be driven (excited). In addition, when the operation devices 300L and 300R stop operating during the transition from the stored state (retracted position) to the expanded state (protruded position), or when the expanded state (protruded position) is maintained, the effect device 300L. The lock mechanism for fixing the position of the movable member at 300R may be set not to operate. When the production devices 300L and 300R have advanced from the stored state (retracted position), a player who recognizes the operation of the production devices 300L and 300R may touch a movable member such as the first slide member 310 or the second slide member 340. is there. In such a case, if the positions of the effect devices 300L and 300R are fixed, there is a possibility that a failure (breakage) of a movable member in the effect devices 300L and 300R, a player's injury, etc. may occur. Therefore, in this case, the lock mechanism is set so as not to be activated to prevent a failure (damage) of the movable member in the effect devices 300L and 300R, an injury of a player who touches the effect devices 300L and 300R, and the like. it can. Even if the lock mechanism is set not to operate, when the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R are stopped, the movable members in the rendering devices 300L and 300R are stopped without returning to the stored state (retracted position) due to their own weight. In addition, various gears of the rendering devices 300L and 300R may be configured. In other words, since the lock mechanism does not operate, the movable member of the effect devices 300L and 300R can be manually returned to the stored state (retracted position) by the player, but the player or the like touches the effect devices 300L and 300R. It may be configured so as not to return to the storage state (retracted position) in the absence. Thereby, the pinching etc. accompanying the operation of the rendering devices 300L and 300R can be suppressed, and the failure (breakage) of the movable member, the breakage of the obstacle, the injury of the player, and the like can be more reliably prevented.

  When the rendering devices 300L and 300R maintain the stored state (retracted position), a setting may be made such that a lock mechanism for fixing the position of the movable member in the rendering devices 300L and 300R is activated. When the rendering devices 300L and 300R are in the stored state (retracted position), for example, the outer surfaces of the left moving unit and the right moving unit are continuous with the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 or the upper or lower surface of the protruding member (the front surface, the upper surface, and the lower surface). (Part of which is configured), a player or the like is less likely to touch the movable member, and even when touched, the possibility of being caught by the movable member is small. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the rendering devices 300L and 300R by setting the lock mechanism to operate so as to prevent the movable members in the rendering devices 300L and 300R from moving forward. .

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a configuration for detecting whether or not the rendering devices 300L and 300R are in the initial position when a predetermined initial position detection condition is satisfied. As an example, if an initial position sensor (for example, a photo sensor) is provided at an initial position where the rendering devices 300L and 300R are in the storage state (retracted position), and a detection signal is input from the initial position sensor, the rendering control is performed. The CPU 120 determines that the rendering devices 300L and 300R are at the initial positions. The initial position detection condition is, for example, established when the power is turned on when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, established when the customer waiting demonstration display (demonstration display) is started, or the start of the big hit gaming state It may be established when the fanfare screen is displayed in relation to the game, or may be established when the big hit gaming state is finished, and other related to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the progress of the production Alternatively, any condition may be set in advance as the initial position detection condition without being related to the progress of the game or the progress of the performance.

  Even when such initial position detection of the rendering devices 300L and 300R can be performed, for example, when the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R are not performed due to the setting during the operation setting screen display or the operation of the setting changeover switch. A restriction may be provided so that the initial position detection is not executed. Further, depending on which condition among the plurality of types of initial position detection conditions is satisfied, a case where the initial position detection is performed and a case where the initial position detection is not performed may be provided. For example, the initial position detection condition that is satisfied when the fanfare screen is displayed is satisfied by receiving an effect control command (a jackpot start designation command, a fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. The initial position detection condition that is satisfied when the big hit game state is ended is satisfied when an effect control command (a big hit end specifying command, an ending specifying command) for specifying the end of the big hit game is received. As described above, when the initial position detection condition is established by receiving the effect control command from the main board 11, the initial position detection is executed even in a setting in which the effects devices 300L and 300R are not operated. On the other hand, the initial position detection condition that is satisfied when the customer waiting demonstration display (demonstration display) is started is that the elapsed time from the end of the variable display of the decorative design (effect design) is set as the demonstration display start time in advance. This is established by determining whether or not the predetermined predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has been reached by the effect control CPU 120 and determining that the demonstration display start time has been reached. As described above, when the initial position detection condition is established based on the determination result in the effect control board 12 separately from the effect control command from the main board 11, in the case where the operation of the effect devices 300L and 300R is not performed, the initial value is set. A restriction may be provided so that position detection is not performed. In addition, while the initial position detection condition is satisfied by receiving the production control command, a restriction is provided so that the initial position detection is not performed, while when the initial position detection condition is established by a determination result different from the production control command, the initial position detection condition is established. Position detection may be executed. Alternatively, in a setting in which the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R are not performed, a restriction may be provided so that all initial position detection is not performed. In other words, in the case of settings where the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R are not performed, it is only necessary to be able to provide a restriction so that the initial position detection is less likely to be performed than in the settings where these operations are performed.

  For simultaneous effects that are simultaneously executed in a plurality of gaming machines installed in the game store at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect devices 300L and 300R are in a stored state (retracted position) and an expanded state (projected position). Operations that vary between may be included. For example, based on the fact that the production start condition is satisfied at 00: 00, the operations of the production devices 300L and 300R are started, and the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340 are deployed from the stored state (retracted position). You may advance to a state (projection position).

  In the simultaneous production, the movable members in the production devices 300L and 300R included in the plurality of gaming machines may be linked to each other so that, for example, the production mode may be a combination of the movable members of adjacent gaming machines. In this case, the interval between adjacent gaming machines may be different for each of a plurality of gaming stores. The movable members in the rendering devices 300L and 300R are connected to decorative members that are shaped and colored so that the rendering mode that combines the movable members does not cause a sense of incongruity even when the spacing between adjacent gaming machines changes. Alternatively, it is sufficient that the operation amount can be set. As an effect mode in which the movable members are combined, for example, a decorative member having a shape imitating a human hand is connected to the movable member, and a plurality of (for example, two) decorative members in adjacent game machines are close to each other and intersect. Anything can be used as long as it can appear to be shaking hands. Alternatively, for example, a decorative member having a shape imitating a sword or a spear is connected to the movable member, and a plurality of (for example, two) decorative members in adjacent game machines cross close to each other so that the sword or the spider crosses. Anything can be used as long as it can be shown.

  Even when the simultaneous effects including the operations of the effect devices 300L and 300R can be executed, the operations of the effect devices 300L and 300R are performed by, for example, setting while the operation setting screen is displayed or operating the setting changeover switch. If not, a restriction may be provided so that at least a part of the simultaneous effects using the effect devices 300L and 300R is not executed. For example, when the operations of the production devices 300L and 300R are not performed due to the settings at the game store side, there are restrictions on the location within the game store, so that the operations of the production devices 300L and 300R in the simultaneous production are also not executed. May be. On the other hand, for example, when the operations of the rendering devices 300L and 300R are not performed due to settings on the player side, the rendering devices 300L and 300R may be operated in the simultaneous rendering regardless of such settings. In the simultaneous production, the production devices 300L and 300R included in a plurality of gaming machines are linked, so that the production in a specific gaming machine does not stand out. On the other hand, if the production devices 300L and 300R are not operated even in a simultaneous performance of only a specific gaming machine among a plurality of gaming machines, there is a possibility that the linkage of the performance is lowered and a sense of incongruity occurs in the simultaneous performance. Therefore, even if the operation is restricted by the setting on the player side, in the simultaneous production, by operating the production devices 300L and 300R, the linkage of the production by the movable member can be enhanced and the interest in the production can be enhanced.

  Before the effect devices 300L and 300R change from the housed state (retracted position) to the expanded state (projected position), the player may be notified that the effect devices 300L and 300R are operating. For example, in response to the determination that the variation category is a variation pattern category for executing a specific type of super reach in step S412 of FIG. It may be displayed in either the storage display area 5H or the active display area AHA. Alternatively, in response to the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” in step S240 shown in FIG. 18, the final stop symbol (determined special symbol or final ornament symbol) that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. Before displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, outputting sound or notification sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, lighting a predetermined notification lamp, The player may be notified that the effect devices 300L and 300R are operated by operating different movable members for effect or by combining some or all of them.

  In this way, by notifying in advance that the effect devices 300L and 300R are operating, the player's interest in the operations of the effect devices 300L and 300R is increased, and the operation of the effect devices 300L and 300R is more noticed by the player. be able to.

  The movable members in the rendering devices 300L and 300R are configured using the first slide member 310 and the second slide member 340, or the outer surface of the left moving unit and the outer surface of the right moving unit are in close contact to expose the inner surface. Thus, the present invention is not limited to the case where a model having a predetermined shape and color appears. For example, a configuration in which a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is built in the movable member, or a configuration in which an audio output member such as a speaker or a blower fan is attached to the movable member may be used.

  The special symbols and decorative symbols are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the special symbol display devices (the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and are specified among the plurality of LEDs during variable display of the special symbols ( Only a single LED) is repeatedly turned on and off, and the other LEDs are kept off. And when the variable display result is “losing”, the special pattern can be obtained by maintaining the state where the LED, which has been repeatedly turned on and off, emits light in a predetermined emission color, or is kept off. Stop display. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are turned on. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol is switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. Good. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display) as a final stop symbol (determined special symbol or definite ornament symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the special symbol or ornament symbol.

  In the above description, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (the effect control CPU 120) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. Is a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. May be configured to transmit a command indicating the variation time and variation mode after the so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd start prize memory display area 5H ... Start prize Memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... First start port switch 22B ... Second start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Hold storage means capable of storing information about variable display that has not yet been started as hold information;
A hold display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means;
A corresponding display executing means for displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display being executed;
An effect execution means capable of executing a corresponding display change effect for notifying the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state by changing and displaying the display mode of the corresponding display;
The effect execution means is configured to execute a common effect when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed and when the display mode of the corresponding display is not changed during execution of variable display, A success effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display after execution or a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display can be executed,
The display mode of the correspondence display includes a normal mode and a special mode that is a mode different from the normal mode,
The special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode having a higher expectation controlled to the advantageous state than the first special mode,
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect that presents a candidate image that suggests a display mode of the correspondence display after the change as the common effect.
As the specific effect, including a plurality of candidate presentation effects that present a plurality of types of candidate images,
Depending on the type of the candidate image presented in the specific effect, the execution ratio of the success effect is different,
The effect execution means can execute the common effect at a plurality of timings including a first timing in one variable display and a second timing after the first timing.
When the common effect is executed at the second timing, the execution ratio of the successful effect is higher than when the common effect is executed at the first timing.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images